Dodge 2012 Caliber Owners Manual Owner's

Dodge-2012-Caliber-Owners-Manual-762047 dodge-2012-caliber-owners-manual-762047

2015-10-23

: Dodge Dodge-2012-Dodge-Caliber-Owners-Manual-814556 dodge-2012-dodge-caliber-owners-manual-814556 dodge pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 506

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2012
OWNER’S MANUAL

Caliber

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number

.............. 6

䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.

Right Front Body VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override . . . . . 19

䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Illuminated Approach — If Equipped . . . . . . . 22

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 22

䡵 Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . 22

▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

▫ Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . 23

▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 24

䡵 Liftgate

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

▫ Lap/ Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
With A Mini-Latch And Buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 52
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 52
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 61
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 68

. . . 86
. . . 87
. . . 87
. . . 88
. . . 89
. . . 91

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a
safe place.

Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

Vehicle Key

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable.
The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot
be removed until you obtain service.

WARNING!

Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN
4 — START

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,
place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three

seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have dealer or by following the customer key programming
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
Replacement Keys
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot authorized dealer.
be programmed to any other vehicle.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
CAUTION!
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle following procedure:
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
tended.
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du- the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized first key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.

Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch. starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. authorized dealer at the time of service to be
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. reprogrammed.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle General Information
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
then turn off.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote subject to the following conditions:
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro- • This device may not cause harmful interference.
grammed during this procedure.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
of the vehicle.
When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK
door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
provides both audio and visual signals, the horn will
and close all doors.
sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance 3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
is still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This
ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During
lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is
turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
automatically disarm. After approximately 16 seconds,
the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly. This shows
that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. The Vehicle
Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle;
however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle
Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in
the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter,
once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm
To Disarm The System
will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK button on
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
Alarm.
the ON/RUN position.
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
your absence, the horn will sound three times and
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.

Three Button RKE Transmitter

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Security Alarm.
following steps:

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnNOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infordimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
mation.
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
lights are turned on manually.
following steps:
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 secwill flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
signal.
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key reSettings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Unmoved.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
its previous setting.
following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security still holding the UNLOCK button.
Alarm.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change key removed.
the current setting, proceed as follows:

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
its previous setting.
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitthe system.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Programming Additional Transmitters
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
Alarm.
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Using The Panic Alarm
General Information
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
following conditions:
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second received including interference that may cause undesired
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- facing down, use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two
proved by the party responsible for compliance could halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to
damage the elastomer seal during removal.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons

Separating Case Halves

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the NOTE:
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
How To Use Remote Start
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the
vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

• RKE PANIC button not pressed

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema• Vehicle theft alarm not active
turely:

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
To Enter Remote Start
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
Press and release the REMOTE START button
third cycle.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the • The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• Any engine warning lamps come on
NOTE:
• Low Fuel Light turns on
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
• The hood is opened
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- • The hazard switch is pressed
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
in the Remote Start mode.
• The brake pedal is pressed
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.

Manual Door Lock Knob

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the key

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Auto Lock Doors Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 - Unlock

2 - Lock

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
switch.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times The doors will unlock automatically if:
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch abled.
to lock the doors.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
programming.
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
4. The driver’s door is opened.
its previous setting.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance
with local laws.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be switch to unlock the doors.
enabled or disabled as follows:
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- programming.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Units previous setting.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforNOTE:
mation.
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
did not enter the programming mode and you will
following procedure:
need to repeat the procedure.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
• Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK five times
ending up in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
— If Equipped
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.

Power Window Switches
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.

WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Power Window Switch Location

Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window controls, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.

Window Lockout Switch

LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start your vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors. The central locking/
unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated
from the liftgate key cylinder.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed NOTE:
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the • In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE
transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
liftgate lock cylinder and turn it to the right (manual
motion.
lock models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the
liftgate open with one fluid motion.
• Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a
snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in
the event of an electrical system malfunction.

WARNING!

Liftgate Handle

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
window
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
equipped
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
wheel
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
positions
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event — if equipped
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow (SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
their arm.
between you and the door.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)

5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.

You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

WARNING!

2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Positioning Lap Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seat, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

locked in position. In the rear seat, move toward the
center of the seat to position the belt away from your
neck.

Lap/ Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions With A
Mini-Latch And Buckle
A three point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle,
allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor
when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder
belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side
trim panel for added convenience.
1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.

Mini-Latch Stowage

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
restraint.
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt

4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the minilatch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connecting Mini-Latch To Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.

Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
shoulder belt.
feature for each seating position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.

First Row
Second Row
Third Row

Driver
N/A
ALR
N/A

Center
N/A
ALR
N/A

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
• N/A — Not Applicable
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.

Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
restrained in the rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- the entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinalocking mode.
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.

Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
Equipped
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback

3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

CAUTION!

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
into the back decorative plastic half.
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.

AHR In Reset Position

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be

triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

Seat Belt Extender

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
the best way to keep the baby safe.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
tender and store it.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
panel below the steering column.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 3 — Knee Bolster
vanced Front Air Bags
2 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
• Steering Wheel and Column
the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). If the vehicle is equipped • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags they are
• Knee Impact Bolster
marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
of the front seats.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
(SABIC)
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
— If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location

NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

The system includes side impact sensors that are cali- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
require air bag occupant protection.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.

WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.

The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, SABIC air bags, SuppleThe side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
mental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags — if equipped, and
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
type of collision.
the severity and type of impact.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecnot good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
have deployed.
collisions depending on the severity and type of collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, or side collisions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of
the air bag.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
especially applies to children.
it is inflated.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
the communication network remains intact, and the
immediately after deployment.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
ing functions:
the air bag system.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipwere buckled/fastened;
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
vehicle or the EDR.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
Child Restraints
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
These data can help provide a better understanding of times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of the rear seats, rather than in the front.
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
crash investigation.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child.
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardcan become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardmatter how strong you are. The child and others facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
size.
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.

WARNING!

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.

in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.

All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
Older Children And Child Restraints
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardin the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
weight and height limits.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
not work when you need it.
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canaconnection to the top tether anchorages have been availdian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webable for some time. For some older child restraints, many
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
the available attachments provided with your child reYour vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor- straint in any vehicle.
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be inAnchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
stalled in the outboard positions only. If you are installing
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seatusing the vehicle seat belt, instead securing the child
ing positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must
use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your
child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only
install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing The Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.

WARNING!
You should never install LATCH-compatible child
seats so that two seats share a common anchorage. If
installing seats in adjacent seating positions, or if
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

Installing The LATCH – Compatible Child
Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of
are provided with the child restraint system.
adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler
restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also
The lower anchorages are round bars, part of
be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to
the seat and body structure, and are readily
the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the
visible. In addition, there are tether strap antension of the strap.
chorages behind each rear seating position,
While there are LATCH anchorages at all three rear
located in the rear surface of the seat back.
seating positions, do not install child restraints at all three
These are round bars, located at the rear of the seat
positions at the same time. The anchorages are not
cushion where it meets the seat back, and just visible
designed to restrain three child restraints at one time.
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
Instead, you may install one child restraint at the center
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
position, or two child restraints at the right and left
along the intersection of the surfaces
positions.
The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
bar, pushing aside the seat cover material
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be attach the hook or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
equipped with separate straps on each side, Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
with each having a hook or connector for of the seat cover material. Then attach the tether strap to

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

the anchorage directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint, preferably between the
head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove the
slack in the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the

seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
children in the vehicle.

WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat
Belts In Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart
below defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate.

First Row
Second Row
Third Row

Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
N/A

Center
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
N/A

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
N/A

Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:
• Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
routing it over the head restraint.

Tether Strap Anchorages

• If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchor.
• Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
the strap.

WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VePets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
hicle”.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
(Continued) seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Air Bag Warning Light
WARNING!
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious perauthorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
sonal injury.
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho(Continued)
rized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 97

▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . 98

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 131

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 148

▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

䡵 Lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 153

▫ Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 153

▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Driver’s Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 162
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 171
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 176 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
䡵 Chill Zone威 Beverage Cooler Storage
Compartment — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side
of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the door glass.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.

Power Mirror Control

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.

Mirror Directions

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
control to the center position to prevent accidentally To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
moving a mirror.
swing the mirror cover upward.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.

Vanity Mirror

NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.

Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be extended out to provide more For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
coverage of the side glass.
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.

system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.

The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone Button
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
button and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.

Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or andetails.
other prompt.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi• For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.

Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:

To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button on the radio control head.
“Device Pairing”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.

phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).

Dial By Saying A Number
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
button to begin.
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile • Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a • The system will prompt you to say the number you
priority level between one and seven, with one being
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
of certain radios.
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Call By Saying A Name

Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook

• Press the

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Press the
“Call”.

button to begin.

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call.
“Phonebook New Entry”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomyou can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previmended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
instead of “Bob”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
book entry, if desired.
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
may appear in the display of certain radios.
phonebook entry that you are adding.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- • To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
main menu.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
start the vehicle.
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatito the Uconnect™ Phone.
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downPhonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Transfer From Mobile Phone
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able for use.
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phoneentry that you wish to edit.
book.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
NOTE:
to the main menu.
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
when the vehicle is not in motion.
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
deleted or edited.
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
• Press the
button to begin.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
language is deleted.
“Phonebook Delete”.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
deleted or edited.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
button to begin.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • Press the
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
“Phonebook Erase All”.
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say • The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
“Delete”.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Note that only the phonebook in the current language • The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
is deleted.
number designation you wish to call.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
Phone Call Features
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
button to begin.
• Press the
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
“Phonebook List Names”.
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phoneAnswer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
book entries, if available.
Currently In Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio syssay “Call”.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” call. Press the
operations at this point.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

call, press and hold the
button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to

call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.

on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the

button to begin.

Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.

Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call

Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
the language selection.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duravoice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone• An active call is automatically transferred to the
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagemobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
specific and is usable across all languages.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is reachable:
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
follows:
• Press the

• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
for the mobile phone directly.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency numWARNING!
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • turned on,
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • paired to the Uconnect™ System,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may • and have network coverage.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
Towing Assistance
area.
If you need towing assistance:
button to begin.

• Press the

button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.

Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
service or automated customer service line. Some serbutton and say
some systems. To do this, press the
vices require immediate response selection. In some
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Paging
Uconnect™ Phone.
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.

NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.

You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone.
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

• Press the

button to begin.

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
one of the following:
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
Phone And Network Status Indicators
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
notification to inform you of your phone and network
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situastatus when you are attempting to make a phone call
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity

from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.

List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
button to begin.
• Press the
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

• When prompted, say “List Phones”.

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
priority phone present in or near (approximately
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
button and
phone being announced, press the
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec- Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
button to begin.
• Press the
paired phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Select Another Mobile Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
This feature allows you to select and start using another
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
wish to delete.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”

You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.

Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogThis procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- Reset
dures:
button.
• press the
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
radio mode):
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
the session begins, or,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training, prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

Voice Command

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).

• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and

• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Send Messages:
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
your phone.
• Press the
button.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
• Press the
button.
button while the
To send a message, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

List of Preset Messages:

13. I’ll be late

1. Yes

14. Are you there yet?

2. No

15. Where are we meeting?

3. Where are you?

16. Can this wait?

4. I need more direction.

17. Bye for now

5. L O L

18. When can we meet

6. Why

19. Send number to call

7. I love you

20. Start without me

8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the

button.

Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Power-Up
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
will then be given a choice to change it.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

pairing
phone book

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.

button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
button while the commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Comwill be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
change commands. This will become helpful once you
Commands
start to learn the options.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
commands. Universal commands are available at all
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
times. Local commands are available if the supported
These commands are universal and can be used from any radio mode is active.
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Changing the Volume

• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.

• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)

2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
menu.
Radio FM
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)

• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Satellite Radio
Disc
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- may say the following commands:
mands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
spoken number)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:

− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)

• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
the following commands:
following:
− “Save” (to save the memo)

• “Change to setup”

− “Continue” (to continue recording)

• “Switch to system setup”

− “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Change to setup”

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

• “Language English”

− “Next” (to play the next memo)

• “Language French”

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• “Language Spanish”

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
• “Tutorial”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
• “Voice Training”
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- vehicle.
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
WARNING!
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
Power Seat Switch
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system automatically switches to LOW-level heating and turns one indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It
will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off
after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If
LOW-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

Front Seat Adjustment

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment lever is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seatback. Rotate the lever downward
to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward
to decrease the lumbar support.

Seat Height Adjustment

Lumbar Adjustment

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Driver’s Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Recline Lever

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner lever to
the full upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.

Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat

Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Lever

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.

Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.

Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.

Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.

Rear Head Restraints
The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on Tether routing.
Folding Seat Strap

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch.
Rear Seats Folded Flat

To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the
seatback into its upright position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Reclining Rear Seat Strap

Then push the seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees maximum, and release the strap.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.

2. Move the safety catch located under the front edge of
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick
panel.

Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
when standing in front of hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the hood in the open position. Place the
hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood
surface.

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

Hood Prop Rod

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights and fog lights. The multifunction lever
is located on the left side of the steering column.

Multifunction Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the multifunction lever
to the second detent for headlight operation.

Headlight Control

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
This feature may be performed by either low beam
headlights or by high beam headlights, depending on the
specific regulations of your geographical area. Daytime
Running Lights (DRL), may operate at a lower intensity
than the normal lamp operation. The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights (DRL),
which is at a lower intensity than the normal high beams.
The DRL’s will come on whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in
any position except for PARK.
NOTE: The DRLs will automatically turn off when the
turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are in operation
and automatically turn back on when the turn signals
and Hazard Warning flashers are not operating.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.

Fog Light Control

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate when the
parking lights or the low beam headlight are on. Switching from low beam to high beam headlights will cause
the fog lights to turn off.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show defective.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Turn Signal Control

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
turn on the high beam headlights until the multifunction
lever is released.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to- Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
pass position for more than 30 seconds, the high beams detent to turn on the interior lighting.
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.

Dimmer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.

Map/Reading Lights

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. The lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF
if the door is left open or light is switched on.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Wiper Control

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever
upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and
downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time.
The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every
second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed

while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

Mist Feature
Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe
to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist Control

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls

Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.

Tilt Steering Control

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control lever is located
on the right side of the steering wheel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control Lever

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press down on the Electronic Speed Control lever and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inspeed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever. crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
To Deactivate
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL, normal brakwill be established.
ing or pressing the clutch pedal while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing Tapping the RESUME ACCEL lever once will result in a
the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or 1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
memory.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

released. Release the lever when the desired speed is Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
Pressing the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph speed, up and down hills. A slight speed change on
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of moderate hills is normal.
the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
Manual Transmission
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed con- Control.
trol. A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic
WARNING!
Speed Control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need
to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without
speed loss.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secuprogramming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
rity Alarm is active.
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indithe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frerelease the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
to rapid.
steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programbefore 1995.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
ing steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigtrained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
pressed.
follow all remaining steps.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
Using HomeLink姞
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
To operate, press and release the programmed
NOT erase the channels.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
erased.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.

General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.

Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.

Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucClosing Sunroof — Express
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half release to Express Close.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatipressed.
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.

Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Ignition Off Operation
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
open.
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
Wind Buffeting
door will cancel this feature.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- position. Opening either front door will cancel this
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located
in the instrument panel for added convenience. This
power outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices.

12 Volt Power Outlet

Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON
or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug
into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,
do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Power Outlet Fuse Location

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
rear of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other
(Continued) low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually, unplug the device and plug it in again.
NOTE: To avoid overloading the circuit, check the
power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
inverter.

115 Volt Power Outlet

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
(Continued)

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

There are two cupholders behind the center console for
CUPHOLDERS
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are rear passengers.
two cupholders located in the front.

Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console contains both an upper and lower the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid
storage compartment.
open.

Upper Storage Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on
the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compartment and lift the lid open.

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES

Lower Storage Compartment

Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for
convenience.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press in on the flashlight to release it.

Press And Release

To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.

Three-Press Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

Cargo Cover
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommodates the reclining rear seat.
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim
panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward
on the opposite end and install it into the same notch
location of the rear trim panel.

Rear Trim Notches

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide
the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides
of the rear trim panel.

Cargo Cover Guides

WARNING!
In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

Removable Load Floor
The cargo area contains a removable load floor.

Rear Cargo Area

Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are two D-rings installed in the cargo area for
securing cargo.

WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
(Continued)

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.

Fold-Down Speakers

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down located on the center portion of the control lever. The
off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and control lever is located on the right side of the steering
column.
other activities.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first
detent to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump and the wiper will continue to operate as
long as the switch is held (for a maximum of 10 seconds).
Upon release, the wiper will continue to cycle two times
before returning to the set position.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “park”.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the Rear Window Defroster
first detent position for rear wiper operation.
The rear window defroster button is located on the
bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
only.
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
CHILL ZONE姞 BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE
COMPARTMENT — IF EQUIPPED
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the vehicle. The large glove compartment door swings
downward and features two levels of storage. The upper
bin functions as the Chill Zone威 cooled beverage storage
compartment (for vehicles equipped with air conditioning) for storing up to four 20 oz (1 L) bottles or cans.
When desired, cool air enters the Chill Zone威 to keep the
contents cool, depending on ambient temperature and
A/C settings.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

Chill Zone威 compartment. Depending on ambient temperature and A/C setting, the compartment can keep
beverages cool.

Glove Compartment and Chill Zone威

NOTE: The use of the Chill Zone威 is for nonperishable
beverages only.
Positioning Slide Control

Inside the Chill Zone威 is a vent which, when opened,
allows either air conditioned or fresh air to flow into the Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for
storage. The lower bin holds the Owner’s Manual and
other important documents.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 200

▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 201

▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . 217

䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 226

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 234
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 236
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/
WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 246
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 254
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio (Sales
Code RES+RSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 255
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 265
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 265

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 270
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones

. . . . . . . 279

䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 280
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Radio
4 — Passenger Airbag

5 — Lower Glove Compartment/Beverage Cooler –
If Equipped
6 — Climate Controls
7 — Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
8 — Hazard Warning Flasher

9 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped
10 — Storage Bins
11 — Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

4. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/kph).
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.

6. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This indicates that the fuel filler door is located ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
on the left side of the vehicle.
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
tank.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before StartProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
7. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for on.
further information.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
This light warns of an overheated engine condithe driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H , the indicator will continuously
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
is allowed to cool.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
11. Brake Warning Light
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
This light monitors various brake functions,
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
including brake fluid level and parking brake
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
application. If the brake light turns on it may
dropped below a specified level.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
13. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the the odometer must be reset at zero.
automatic transmission.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
14. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has odometer messages will display:
been driven.
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gate Ajar
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur- gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temp Too Hot
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the inmileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
strument cluster, all warnings including “door” and
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
“gATE” and “CHANgE OIL” will only be displayed in

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

the EVIC display. For additional information, refer to HOTOIL
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If When this message is displayed there is a engine overtemperature condition. When this condition occurs, the
Equipped”.
“HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odometer
gASCAP
along with a chime.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Refer to “Engine Oil Overheating” under in “What To Do
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display In Emergencies”.
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
noFUSE
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
the vehicle is started.
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomA loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap eter display area. For further information on fuses and
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
LoW tirE
When tire pressure is low, the odometer display will CHANgE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
system is ON.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
16. Trip/Odometer Display Reset Button
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
following procedure:
to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in Trip mode to
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. reset.
Do not start the engine.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
This light informs you of a problem with the
times within 10 seconds.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.

19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
20. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
ON/RUN.
until the vehicle is disarmed.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when the ignition switch is turned to the
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
that caused the ESC activation.
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine 23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
lights are on.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

WARNING!

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.

26. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
Equipped
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
During sustained high speed driving on hot in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
days, the automatic transmission oil may be- boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
come too hot. If this happens, the Transmission components and cause a fire.
Temperature Warning Light will come on and
the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic trans- 28. High Beam Indicator
mission cools down enough to allow a return to the
This indicator shows that the high beam headrequested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the EVIC messages.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
for further information.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.

30. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Button — If Equipped
Press the left EVIC button to scroll through sub-menus.
Press and hold the reset button for approximately two
seconds, to reset the display shown.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
for further information.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The EVIC consists of the following:

• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)

• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Heading
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect™ phone Displays — If equipped
• Audio Mode Display

• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – vehicle not in park
(automatic transmission) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmission).

• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion) — vehicle graphic shows which door(s) is/are
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
ajar
the following messages:
• Gate Ajar (with a vehicle graphic showing the liftgate
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
open and a single chime sounds)
after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
• Lights On
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

• Key In Ignition
• Low Tire
• Service TPM System
• Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System
• Oil Change Required
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

and a single chime sounds to indicate the next scheduled
oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the EVIC button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine.)

Oil Change Required — If Equipped
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The ⬙Oil Change Required⬙ message
will display in the EVIC when the Key is turned to RUN 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Compass/Temperature/Audio
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Average Fuel Economy
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
EVIC Functions
• Elapsed Time
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur
if a resettable function is currently being displayed.
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
EVIC Button
facing, the outside temperature, and the current radio
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func- station.
tions are displayed on the EVIC:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

For additional information regarding the compass, refer When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
to
“Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will
Features)”.
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
Average Fuel Economy
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will be disWhen the fuel economy is reset, the display will show
played, based on the current values in the DTE calculadashes for two seconds. Then, the history information
tion and the current fuel tank level.
will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the
Elapsed Time
last fuel reading before the reset.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
in the ON or START position.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel Displays Tire Pressure status using a vehicle graphic, a
status message, and pressure values. Refer to “Tire Prestank level. This is not resettable.
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in “Starting and OperNOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
ating” for further information.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).

NOTE: Uconnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.

Auto Door Locks
Press and release the EVIC button until “Personal Set- When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
tings — Press & Hold” is displayed in the EVIC.
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
Press and Hold the EVIC button to enter the Personal
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Settings Sub-Menu and then use short presses of the
Auto Unlock On Exit
EVIC button to step to one of the following choices.
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
Language
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
When in this display you may select different languages
(manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (autoPress and Hold the EVIC button to change the language
matic transmission). Press and hold the EVIC button
between English, Espanol, or Francais depending on
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
availability. As you continue, the displayed information
make your selection.
will be shown in the selected language.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

RKE Unlock
When Driver Dr. 1st Press is selected only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a
second press to unlock the remaining locked doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until “All Doors 1st Press” appears to make your
selection.

Flash Lamps Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.

Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Sound Horn with Lock
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature your selection.
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps feature.
Key-Off Power Delay
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
When this feature is selected, the power window
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“OFF”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make
your selection.

Display Units In
The Outside Temperature, Average Fuel Economy, Distance To Empty, and Tire Pressure EVIC features can be
changed between U.S. and Metric.

Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “OFF”, “30 sec.”,
“60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your selection.

Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“U.S.” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.

Automatic Compass Calibration
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by comHill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
pleting one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now
Operating” for system function and operating informa- function normally.
tion. To make your selection, press and release the EVIC
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.

Compass Variance Map

To Set the Variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one second) press and
release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed the Personal Settings - Press & Hold⬙. Press
and Hold the EVIC button to enter the Personal Settings
Sub-Menu. Once in the Personal Settings Sub-Menu,

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

press and release (less than one second) the EVIC button
several times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted.
The “Compass Variance” message and the current variance zone number will be displayed. To change the zone,
press and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC
button to increment the variance one step. Repeat as
necessary, with individual long (for at least one second)
EVIC button presses for each increment, until the desired
variance is achieved. To exit the Variance Programming,
press the EVIC button with a short (less than one second)
button press.

Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.

2. Using a quick button press (less than one second),
press and release the EVIC button several times until the
EVIC displays the “Personal Settings - Press & Hold”.
Press and Hold the EVIC button to enter the Personal
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During programSettings Sub-Menu.
ming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
3. Once in the Personal Settings Sub-Menu, press and
Zone 1.
release (less than one second) the EVIC button several
times until “Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed.
4. Using a long button press (more than one second)
press the EVIC button, this will place the Compass in

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

calibration mode. The CAL indicator will come on con- MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com- RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
pass is now in the calibration mode, and that the vehicle (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
can now be driven to calibrate.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
5. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle side of the radio faceplate.
in one or more complete 360–degree circle under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A short EVIC button press from the ⬙Calibrate
Compass (Yes)⬙ screen will exit the EVIC CustomerProgrammable Features, and return it to its normal
operating mode.

Media Center 230 (REQ)

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
time to turn off the radio.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
Electronic Volume Control
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Equipped
volume and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be (if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
set at the same volume level as last played.
details.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not Clock Setting Procedure
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
screen.
SCROLL control knob.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further will begin to blink.
details.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With knob to save the time change.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
screen.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
TIME Button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
and frequency display.
step 2.

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.

RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl

Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock

16-Digit Character
Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options • VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
will display the following:
OFF (if equipped).
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch • VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
equipped).
available on the disc (if equipped).
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
the disc) (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
equipped).
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
NOTE:
changes.
• The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
• These selections can only be made while playing a
defaults according to customer preference.
DVD.

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by

the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.

CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
reading the disc.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
CAUTION!
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
player mechanism.
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD currently playing.
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio TIME Button (CD MODE)
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable • Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
• Maximum number of files: 255
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
• Maximum number of folders: 100
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeradio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
character extension)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.

MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

WMA
Specification

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

WMA

44.1 and 48

48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
affected by the following:
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than playable files).
CD-R media
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
No function.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.

Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” for further details.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.

SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welDTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The- come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
ater Systems, Inc.
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at wwwEquipped
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Number (ESN/SID)
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, Please have the following information available when
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- calling:
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has Number (ESN/SID).
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
System Activation
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio ESN/SID Access
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.

Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
cause signal blockage.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
(Satellite) Mode
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.

additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availseconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
lected.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
type.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
button number will display.
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Buttons 1 - 6
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Equipped
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
side of the radio faceplate.
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.

Media Center 130 (RES)

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
will remain tuned to the new station until you make SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
another selection. Holding either button will bypass knob to save time change.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
and radio frequency.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Clock Setting Procedure
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SCROLL control knob.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will begin to blink.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the front and rear speakers.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. MP3 Audio Play
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
NOTE:
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
DISC Button
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD file recording media and formats are limited. When
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) tions.
button works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
character extension)
VBR bit rate.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•

•

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).

Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fearadio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “UnderON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
volume and to the left decreases it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
SEEK Buttons
screen.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- will begin to blink.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With knob to save time change.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
screen.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
TIME Button
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
and radio frequency.
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
Clock Setting Procedure
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.

RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl

Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock

16-Digit Character
Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:

• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
to save time change.
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.

Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanTIME Button
dom Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
works in a similar manner.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
AM/FM Button
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

24, 22.05, 16

160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc.
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilPressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxildren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
limited coverage in Alaska.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the System Activation
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
down.
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welPress this button to change the display to time of day. The
come kit that contains general information, including
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
ignition is OFF).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling:
mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa(Satellite) Mode
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

additional three seconds will make the radio display the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SETUP Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
MUSIC TYPE Button
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription.
lected.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
or glove compartment.
which is located in the center console or glove compartiPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
ment.
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
USB/AUX Connector Port

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below.
audio device)
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disControlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
Using Radio Buttons
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
Using This Feature
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
USB port:
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound Play Mode
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
etc.) information on the radio display.
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio • A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
USB device and display data:
seconds.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous track.
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
Track⬙.
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
the current track.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
holding the FF >> button.
Off⬙.

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275

• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277

Selecting Different Audio Device

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
access the switches.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a The button located in the center of the left-hand control
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will tune to the next preset station that you have prowill increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons.
switch will decrease the volume.
CD Player
The button located in the center of the right-hand control Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on
the CD. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
previous track, if it is within one second after the current
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch changes
Radio Operation
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next
button does not function for all other radios.
listenable station. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK
down for the next listenable station.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS
Blower Control
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
Rotate this control to regulate the
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

Temperature Control
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to regulate the temRotate this control to choose from sevperature of the air inside the passenger
eral patterns of air distribution. You
compartment. Rotating the dial left
can select either a primary mode as
into the blue area of the scale indicates
identified by the symbols on the concooler temperatures, while rotating
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
right into the red area indicates
The closer the setting is to a particular
warmer temperatures.
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- Panel
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumulaAir is directed through the outlets in the instrument
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there Defrost
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxilower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
cool conditions.
NOTE:
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a • The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuwindow demist outlets.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
Mix
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in • For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Feacold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Floor

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

Recirculation Control
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbPressing the Recirculation Control button will
ing the mode control selection.
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
be used when outside conditions such as
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
control button to illuminate.
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
NOTE:
when the Air Conditioning system is
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
temperatures, while rotating right into
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
the red area indicates warmer temweather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
peratures.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

Automatic Temperature Control

Automatic Operation
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat NOTE:
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
occupants only.
without affecting automatic operation.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
the Temperature Control knob. Once
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
the comfort level is selected, the systhat the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
tem will maintain that level automatiair conditioning is not necessary.
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
adjustment.
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
reducing air conditioning performance.
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.

Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

NOTE:
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
the Mode control dial. Press this butfloor mode in order to improve window clearing.
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
modes are selected.
manual compressor operation is selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
• Recirculation Control
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
The system will automatically control recircupress the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
Control button will put the system in recircuinterior air to condense on windows and hamper
lation mode. This can be used when outside
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
the control button to illuminate.

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula- Operating Tips
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
control button to blink and then turn off.
suggested control settings for various weather condi• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you tions.
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Summer Operation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level and then press Winter Operation
the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
possibility of window fogging.
fogging.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291

Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.

Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”

in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 302

▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 299

▫ Five–Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 302

▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 299

▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 304

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 302

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 306
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 324

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 325

䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual
Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 322

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Tire Safety Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 337

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

䡵 Tires — General Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 343

䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 351

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 353

▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 364

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫ Installing A Trailer Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 369
䡵 Vehicle Loading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome,
Etc.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

STARTING PROCEDURES
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

NOTE:
• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
key.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it
will disengage automatically when the engine is running.

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.

CAUTION!

If Engine Fails To Start
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- 15 seconds before trying again.
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine After Starting
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key warms up.
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
Five–Speed Manual Transmission
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
vehicle unattended without having the parking
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
WARNING!
especially on an incline.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
pedal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.

Shift Pattern

NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission
lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher
shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the
transmission.

Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch Recommended Shift Speeds
can result from starting in third gear.
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
AccelEngine
eration 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Size
Rate
All En- Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
gines
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.

CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be
overburdened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING!

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.

(Continued)

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK
position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift transmission gear ratios, and will display the current
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis- Gear Ranges
sion (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
may sometimes ⬙feel⬙ as if it is slipping, but this is normal NEUTRAL into another gear range.
and does not harm anything.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Some models include a
LOW position; in others, manual shifts are made using
the AutoStick威 shift control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this
section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+)
while in the DRIVE position (if equipped with
AutoStick威) will manually select from a set of predefined

Shift Lever

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.

CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
(Continued)

The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 mode (if
equipped) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

using a lower gear will improve performance and extend AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more
buildup.
control. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine brakDuring sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
may become too hot. If this happens, the transmission
also provide you with more control during passing, city
overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough
trailer towing, and many other situations. Automatic
to allow a return to the requested speed. This is done to
ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT)
high speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur,
and/or the engine from overspeed. Changes down will
as before, in a cyclic fashion.
only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stallLOW – IF EQUIPPED
ing.
This range should be used for engine braking when
Operation
descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for maximum engine braking, NOTE: AutoStick威 is not available until the CVT warms
and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed. up in cold weather.

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

AutoStick威 operation is activated in the DRIVE position
by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Moving the shift
lever to the (+) side will activate AutoStick威 and shift up
to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are already
operating in or near Overdrive, in which case sixth gear
ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving the shift
lever to (-) will activate AutoStick威 and shift to the next
lower manual ratio. After AutoStick威 is activated, the
manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission
ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the (+) or (-)
direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio.
AutoStick威 Is Deactivated:
• By holding the shift lever to (+) momentarily
• When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE
• When in sixth position, touching the shift lever to the
right

• When heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application is detected
General Information
• If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
automatically select the first gear ratio.
• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transmission will automatically select
the next higher ratio.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
the front (driving) wheels.
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.

POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticidoes not in any way damage the steering system.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoWARNING!
rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
Parking Brake
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
When
the
parking
brake
is applied with the ignition
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
switch
in
the
ON
position,
the
“Brake Warning Light” in
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
the
instrument
cluster
will
illuminate.
completely.

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.

any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
BRAKE SYSTEM
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will light.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.

WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
The “ABS Warning Light” monitors the ABS Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. ImmediSystem. The light will come on when the ate repair to the ABS is required.
ignition switch is turned to the ON position When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.

related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inIf the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the debris, or panic stops.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

You may also experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock mode:
• the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves
• brake pedal pulsations
• a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
WARNING!
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
Operating” for further information.
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailBrake Assist System (BAS)
ing road conditions.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
•
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensdriving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning the rate and amount of brake application and then
ing.
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
(HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESC.

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

(Continued)

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission
Only
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.

Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the HSA Activation Criteria
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. activate:
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
• Vehicle must be stopped.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

• Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
tion.
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:

WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
5. Release the clutch pedal.
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
This system enhances directional control and stability of
20 seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corand turn off two times.
rects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condiadditional half-turn to the right.
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
times to confirm HSA is disabled.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition.
to it’s previous setting.
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
• ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent collisions.
• The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and
more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is
required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Tire Markings
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designainto the sidewall preceding the size designation. Extion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.

5
Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs NOTE:
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
[295 kg]).
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
calculated in Step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
(392 kg).
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire over-heating and failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
temperature changes.
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
WARNING!
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
75 mph (120 km/h).
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
pattern.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipthe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempodriver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
80D18 103M.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equiptire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manuequivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivasafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

TIRE CHAINS
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom- (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
mended.
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
CAUTION!
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires checked before using these tire types.
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and different loads and perform different steering, driving,
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the unequal rates.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on “cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

NOTE:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
the tire.
or condition.
Base System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
while adjusting your tire pressure.
instrument cluster.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even and to maintain the proper pressure.
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi- Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
nate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an with any of the following scenarios:
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire sensors.
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire that affects radio wave signals.
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW
TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres- 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
sures have been received. The vehicle may need to be 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
receive this information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
wheel and tire assembly.
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
solid.
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the low
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
tire.
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- information.
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

Premium System – If Equipped
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levCenter (EVIC)
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
module.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiNOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
the proper pressure.
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” text
• Receiver Module
message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the
“LOW TIRE” text message will no longer be displayed,
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.

Low Tire Pressure Display

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

Service TPM System Display

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
text message will not be present, and a pressure value

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presoccur with any of the following scenarios:
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
wheel and tire assembly.
that affects radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “LOW TIRE”
text message and the graphic with the low tire pressure
flashing will be displayed.

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure values.

limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will following conditions:
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
operation.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S18002015B
Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267T-S180015B

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

2.0L And 2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, Reformulated Gasoline
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
these engines.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
prove air quality.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
before considering service for the vehicle.

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

CAUTION!

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.

• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
E-85 perform the following:
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery
nia reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Materials Added To Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
exposure to E-85 fuel.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION! (Continued)

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
(Continued) the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.

CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could
let impurities into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

Fuel Filler Door

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and Federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and press the odometer/trip odometer RESET
button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

VEHICLE LOADING
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminclick. This is an indication that cap is properly tightistration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
ened.
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicle Certification Label
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information:
GVWR.
• Name of manufacturer
Tire Size
• Month and year of manufacture
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Rim Size
• Type of Vehicle
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Inflation Pressure
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
all loading conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.

Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
Overloading
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels, vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as operate.
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- ready for operation⬙ condition.
hicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. and trailer when weighed in combination.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
allowance for the presence of a driver.

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
Tongue Weight (TW)
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumThe tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
sized trailers.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control and thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.

Installing A Trailer Hitch
NOTE: If you install a trailer hitch after you purchase
the vehicle, you must install a MOPAR威 or equivalent
spare tire hold down kit. The kit will allow you to
properly secure the spare tire and jack assembly.

WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle without a properly secured tire and jack assembly. Any loose items may be
thrown forward in a collision or hard stop and strike
occupants, causing serious or fatal injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Max. Trailer Hitch
Class
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
1,500 lbs (680 kg)

Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
150 lbs (50 kg)
150 lbs (50 kg)
225 lbs (136 kg)

2.0L Auto/Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
2.4L Auto/Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
2.0L Auto/Man with Trailer
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
Tow Content in Security
Group Package (AJB)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with Trailer
Tow Content in Security
Group Package (AJB)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.

5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.

Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
(Continued)

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(this requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires

− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.

− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
spare tire.
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
personal injury.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.

Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.

Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes

5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
− City Driving
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage it
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transuntil you can get back to cruising speed.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to speed.
maximize fuel efficiency.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Dolly Tow
On Trailer

Wheels OFF the Ground
None

Front
Rear
All

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC
position.

Manual Transmission
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• Key in ACC
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK

Automatic
Transmission
NOT ALLOWED

OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK

CAUTION!
Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will
result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all
drive wheels are off the ground.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

䡵 Automatic Transmission Overheating

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

. . . . . . . 389

䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transmission
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating may reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.

390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391

Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.

6
Spare Tire And Jack Stowage Without Tie Down Strap

Spare Tire And Jack Stowage With Tie Down Strap

Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.

392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.

(Continued)

6
Jack Warning Label

394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.

NOTE: Refer to “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information about
the spare tire, it’s use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.

Jacking Locations

NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on
each side of the body. The front locations are outlined by
two triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill
flange assembly. The rear location is the same but with
two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with
plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the
jacking locations in the body.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395

6
Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is

396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
wheel to be changed.

WARNING!
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397

NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

Mounting Spare Tire

WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.

7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened
the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.

398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.

Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399

snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut

4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud

5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of

400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nuts.
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access
the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two
finger screws, located on the radiator support.

Positive Battery Post

Air Intake Finger Screws

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.

WARNING!
NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this
Jump-Starting procedure.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.

CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
you should have the battery and charging system in- If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
spected at your authorized dealer.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 1st gear
and Reverse (with manual transmission). Using minimal
accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.

406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic
transmission) or 1st gear and Reverse (with
manual transmission), do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system
OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
3.
Turn
the
ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
without
starting
the engine (engine OFF).
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located 5. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, push and
hold the override release lever forward.
on the right side of the shift lever housing.

408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition

WheelsOFFThe Ground

Flat Tow

NONE
Rear
Front
ALL

Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD

MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Trans in NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409

With Ignition Key
Automatic Transmission
Automatic transmission vehicles can be towed with the
front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels OFF the ground).

CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Manual Transmission

• Manual transmission vehicles can also be towed with
the front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all
wheels OFF the ground).

CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow disabled vehicle if condition is
related to a clutch, transmission or other driveline
components. Damage to the drivetrain could result.
All Transmissions
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed (wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must
be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. Make
certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.

• Manual transmission vehicles can be flat towed (all
four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever
NEUTRAL.
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.

410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.

Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 415

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 415

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Automatic Transmission (CVT) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

▫ Front Headlamps, Parking, And Turn Signal
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Rear Tail, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps . . 451

▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 439

▫ License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . 454

䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

䡵 Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 456
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L

7
1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

6
7
8
9

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Coolant Pressure Cap
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Coolant Reservoir

414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

6
7
8
9

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Coolant Pressure Cap
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Coolant Reservoir

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem

416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- crank or start the engine.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The range markings will consist of a crosshatch
zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch zone that says MIN
at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of
the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil
level at the full end of the indicator range.

420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
This symbol means that the oil has
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
been certified by the American
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamanufacturer only recommends
tion.
API Certified engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.

Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomEngine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
are followed.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler Materials Added To Engine Oils
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
grade for your engine.
engineered product and its performance may be imLubricants which do not have both the engine oil certipaired by supplemental additives.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numDisposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
ber should not be used.
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.

Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
quality oil filters and are recommended.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
maintenance intervals.
recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423

Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.

Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental removed. Particular attention should also be given to

426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
gasoline, etc.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependLock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
lock cylinder.
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Windshield Wiper Blades
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
necessary.
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This Adding Washer Fluid
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment (right rear side), and the fluid level
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
(antifreeze).
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.

Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System

WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431

Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(Continued) coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before

432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainPlease review these recommendations for using Hybrid tain the proper level of protection against freezing acOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
anticipated.
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433

WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines
shown on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
with your local authorities to determine the disposal

434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
recovery bottle must also be protected against freezmaintain the proper level, it should be added to the
ing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
Points To Remember
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporand distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
your engine which contains aluminum components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked

436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.

438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If Equipped

CAUTION! (Continued)

Selection Of Lubricant
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manuIt is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
facturer’s recommended fluid will cause belt slip
transmission to assure optimum transmission perforand result in a complete transmission failure!
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
mission fluid which has been formulated with special
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the
information.
proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Special Additives
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
CAUTION!
(CVTF+4威). CVTF+4威 is an engineered product and its
performance
may be impaired by supplemental
• Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
additives.
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check
Routine fluid level checks are not required. The transmis(Continued) sion filler tube is capped and does not include a dipstick.
Your authorized dealer can check the transmission fluid

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439

level using a special service dipstick. Should you notice Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, have the fluid
Frequency Of Fluid Change
level checked immediately. Operation with incorrect
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
Fluid And Filter Changes
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubriRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper cant has become contaminated with water.
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
changed immediately.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Fluid Level Check
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
of the hole.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will Washing
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vebody protection.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
The most common causes of corrosion are:
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441

CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care

442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manchrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
ner:
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a high quality cleaner, to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443

Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.

MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom- Cleaning Headlights
mended for leather upholstery.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution foltaken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
lowed by rinsing.
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Glass Surfaces
Instrument Panel Bezels
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
CAUTION!
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vecleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winhicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
contact any surface.
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
Instrument Panel Cover
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
protectants or other products which may cause undesirbe used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp
low glare surface.
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445

Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Integrated Power Module

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
1
Empty
2

MiniFuse
15 Amp
Lt Blue

Description
Empty
AWD/4WD Control
Module – If Equipped

446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
3
4

20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red

30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green

8
9

MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

40 Amp
Green

Description
Rear Center Brake
Light Switch
Ignition Switch/
Occupant Classification Module
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Power Mirror/
Steering Control Satellite Radio/HandsFree Phone
Ignition Off Draw
Ignition Off Draw
Power Seats

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
10
11
12
13
14
15

MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red

40 Amp
Green

Description
Power Locks/Interior
Lighting
Power Outlet
115V AC Inverter – If
Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Instrument Cluster
Radiator Fan

15 Amp
Lt Blue

10 Amp
Red

Dome Lamp/
Sunroof/Rear Wiper
Motor
Wireless Control
Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
18
40 Amp
Green
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

MiniFuse

Description
Auto Shutdown Relay

20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt Blue
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
26

Radio Amplifiers

Radio

Intrusion Module/
Siren – If Equipped
Heating, AC/
Compass
Auto Shutdown Relay

29
30

20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red

31
Power Sunroof – If
Equipped
Heated Mirror – If
Equipped

MiniFuse
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

30 Amp
Pink

Description
Auto Shutdown Relay
Airbag Control Module
Airbag Control
Module/Occupant
Classification Module
Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
Heated Seat – If
Equipped
Headlamp Washer –
If Equipped
Auto Shutdown Relay

448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
33

34
35
36

MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red

30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink

Description
J1962 Conn/
Powertrain Control
Module
Antilock BrakeValve
Antilock Brake Pump

25 Amp
Natural

Headlamp/Washer
Control/Smart Glass
– If Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater –
If Equipped

CAUTION!
• When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449

VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
battery.
be used for replacement.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
Front Header Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Center Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Rear Cargo/Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–A35LF
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Bulb Number
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior
Low
Beam/High
Beam
Headlamp
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . H13
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
Front
Park/Turn
Signal/Side
Marker
Lamp
. . . 3157AK
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
Front
Fog
Lamp
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . PSX24W
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
Center
High-Mounted
Stop
Lamp
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Assembly
started again.
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 W16W
License Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W

450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT
Front Headlamps, Parking, and Turn Signal
Lamps
NOTE: The headlamp bulb can be accessed from under
the hood without the removal of the inner fender well. It
will be necessary to remove the inner fender well to
service the park/turn signal bulb that is located toward
the outboard side of the head lamp unit.
1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.

5. Grasp the bulb, twist 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
pull straight out of front lamp unit.
Fog Lamps

CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
2. Working in the appropriate wheel well, loosen the
2. Remove the front wheel and tire on the same side of
front of the splash shield, but do not fully remove it.
the vehicle as the fog lamp being serviced. Refer to
3. Looking up through the front wheel well, locate the “Jacking and Tire Changing” in “What To Do In Emerbulb which needs replacing. The headlamp bulb is the gencies” for further information.
inboard bulb and the park/turn signal bulb is the out3. Remove the three screws that secure the outboard side
board bulb.
of the front wheel house splash shield to the front fascia.
4. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451

4. Remove the push pin fastener that secures the inboard Rear Tail, Turn Signal, and Backup Lamps
side of the splash shield to the front end sheet metal.
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
5. Remove the two push pin fasteners that secure the
forward edge of the splash shield to the front fascia
closure panel.
6. Fold the front of the splash shield rearward far enough
to access the back of the front fascia.
7. From behind the front fascia disconnect the engine
compartment wire harness connector from the front fog
lamp bulb connector receptacle.
8. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
9. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.

452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist and remove socket from the lamp.

NOTE: It is not necessary to completely remove the tail
lamp unit. Once loosened from the quarter panel, there
should be enough room to service any of the bulbs.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453

5. Remove the bulb from the socket and replace.

License Lamps
1. Using a trim stick or equivalent, gently pry on the side
of the license plate lamp to release it from the liftgate.

454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise and re- 3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
move from the lamp.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
The lamp is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455

FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.
13.6 Gallons

Metric
51.5 Liters

4.5 Quarts

4.26 Liters

7.2 Quarts

6.8 Liters

456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If
Equipped
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 CVTF+4威 Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 462

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Depending on operating conditions, the message may
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
scheduled maintenance.
the next 500 miles (805 km).

C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S On

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 M

NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichwhile the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
ever comes first.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Once A Month

• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
CAUTION!
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, and power steering and add as
S
C
needed.
H
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
D
operation.
U
L
E
S

At Each Oil Change

Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 M

8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 M

40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 M

72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 M

96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏

Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M

120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
N
T 102 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
136,000 miles (221 000 km).

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 M

152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 477

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

䡵 If You Need Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 478

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 478
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE

478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls
at
1-800-333-0510
or
go
to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

486 INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 431
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 422
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,425
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,284,424
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,71
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,75,89,203
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,68,71

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 66,68,71
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,267
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 431,455,456
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 284
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,299,389
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,438

INDEX 487

Fluid and Filter Changes
Fluid Level Check . . . . .
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

439
438
438
307
438
312

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Beverage Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,435
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,325
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,435
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 86
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,450
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,449
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 455
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414,421
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,367
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

488 INDEX

Cargo Compartment
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,279
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,416
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,78
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,247,256
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 270
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455,456
Cooler, Beverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,433

INDEX 489

Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Driving
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,282,288
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,434
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 431
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

490 INDEX

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 162
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 215
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 416
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,367
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,455,456
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414,421
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 72
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,88,367
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,427
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

INDEX 491

Adding . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,456
Additives . . . . . . . .
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Capacity . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Clean Air . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,209,451
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Materials Added . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Octane Rating . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,210,450
Requirements . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Fuel System Caution . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,456

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,367
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

492 INDEX

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,369,415
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,131,362
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,372

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 155
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375

INDEX 493

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 166 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,392
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,201 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

494 INDEX

Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,449
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,152
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,75,89,203
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 330
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,210,450
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 212
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18,210
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 211
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,152,155,451
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 201

INDEX 495

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,371
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 212,416
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,302
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,480
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

496 INDEX

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,416
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,72 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 39,65,66,68,71 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,388
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,481
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,208 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,455 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 337
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,455
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 178
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

INDEX 497

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,318
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Rear Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 277
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,81
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

498 INDEX

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,267
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 48
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,77
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

INDEX 499

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,247,256
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 291
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,209,451
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,346,391
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 162,208
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,318
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 61
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

500 INDEX

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 284
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 201,389
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 337
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,341,483
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,338
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 353
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,341
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

INDEX 501

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,299

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,302
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,438
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 166
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,209,451
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . .
Understanding Your Instrument Panel
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

270
101
198
483

502 INDEX

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 270 Washer
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Water
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,369,371 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,449 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,282,288
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,160
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,426
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.

Chrysler Group LLC
12PM491-126-AE

5th Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2011:11:17 11:26:49-05:00
Create Date                     : 2011:11:17 11:06:40Z
Metadata Date                   : 2011:11:17 11:26:49-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2012 Dodge Caliber Owner's Manual
Description                     : 5th Edition
Creator                         : 12PM491-126-AE
Subject                         : 940525
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.3.1 (Windows)
Keywords                        : 940525
Document ID                     : uuid:45e3e74c-5a6a-4041-a115-537b6fd7ad30
Instance ID                     : uuid:31b1c725-2c1d-4530-bc1b-db817d63049a
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 506
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : 12PM491-126-AE

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Dodge 2012 Caliber Owners Manual Owner's

Dodge-2012-Caliber-Owners-Manual-762047 dodge-2012-caliber-owners-manual-762047

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation